2017 Dodge Durnago Owner`s Manual - Dealer E

2017 Dodge Durnago Owner`s Manual - Dealer E
2017 Durango
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2017
17WD01-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Durango
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .7
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take time to
become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission,
and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles
on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve
with experience. When driving off-road, or working the
vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to
overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe
federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you
drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision.
Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
INTRODUCTION 5
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
Drive carefully.
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
Rollover Warning Label
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury
and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right front
seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped VIN.
INTRODUCTION 7
This number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save
this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
1
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
VIN Location
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . . .13
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Customer Key Fob Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .16
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .23
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Remote Start Abort Message — If Equipped . . . .24
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .26
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .87
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY . . . . .30
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a key fob and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
2
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature — Passive Entry
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle⬙ for further information).
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button, as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has three operating
positions which are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Key Not Detected Feature
If the ignition position does not change with a push of the
ignition button, and the instrument cluster display message “Key Fob Not Detected” is being displayed, the key
fob may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the keyless push button
ignition. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
key) of the key fob against the keyless ignition push button
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and push to operate the ignition. Once the starter engages
and the engine starts remove the key fob from the keyless
ignition push button.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at
the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then
pull the key out with your other hand.
Low Or Dead Key Fob Battery Starting Procedure
Key Fob
Key Fob
The key fob also includes an emergency key, which stores
in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should
the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. The
emergency key is also for locking the glove compartment.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Upon opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display in
the cluster.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node is
in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in the OFF
position and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob and a Keyless Push Button
Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to
the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. If
an invalid key fob is used to attempt to start and operate
the vehicle, the system will not allow the engine to crank.
If an invalid key fob is used to start the engine, the system
will shut the engine off in two seconds.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilizer system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
Customer Key Fob Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the
park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle
Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off
after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if
the trigger remains active and then the vehicle security
alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the OFF
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And
Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicles keyless ignition
system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system is
OFF, and the key is physically removed from the
ignition.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry unlock door handle (if
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, push the keyless ignition button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry, insert a valid key into the ignition and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the
vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
Security System Manual Override
NOTE:
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the
“Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
vehicle security alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
The remote keyless entry system allows you to lock or
unlock the doors, open the power liftgate, or activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m) using a hand-held key fob. The key fob does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 MPH (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all key fob buttons
for all key fobs.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Flash Lamps With Lock
Key Fob
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the key fob. The time for
this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped through
Uconnect. To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are
locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or
turned off. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the Panic button on the key fob for at least one second and
release. When the Panic Alarm is activated, the turn signals
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm
is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will
remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
Batteries could contain dangerous materials. Please dispose of them according to respect for environment and
local laws.
2
• Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You can
dispose of them either in the correct containers as
specified by law or by taking them to an authorized
dealer, which will deal with their disposal.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Separating Key Fob Case
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Remove The Emergency Key
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key, #2 flat blade
screwdriver, or a coin into the slot and gently pry the
two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not to
damage the seal during removal.
Separating Key Fob Case With A Coin
Separating Key Fob Case With Emergency Key
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Replace Battery In The Key Fob
4. Fit a new battery in place of the depleted battery. When
replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to
the + sign on the inside of the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils
may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
5. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together until they are tightly clamped.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Vehicle Security Alarm is not signaling an intrusion
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
• Liftgate closed
Remote Start Abort Message — If Equipped
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• PANIC button not pushed
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
The Remote Start Abort message stays active until the
ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
Push and release the REMOTE START button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock,
the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice
(if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the
vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the key fob. However, the ignition must be cycled by
pushing the START/STOP button twice (or the ignition
switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position) before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable with a one time push of the remote start button for
two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the key fob to unlock the doors and
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then,
prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release
the START/STOP button.
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active
— Push Start Button” will display in the cluster display
until you push the START button.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated
and deactivated through the Uconnect Settings. For more
information on Remote Start Comfort System operation,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
The power door locks can be manually locked from inside
the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door,
push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the
door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock
knob is down when the door is closed, the door will lock.
Therefore, make sure the key is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING! (Continued)
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOffⴖ mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Unsupervised use of the vehicle equipment may
cause severe person injuries and death.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
(Continued)
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
The power door lock and unlock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate.
NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
If you push the door lock switch while the ignition position
is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver or front passenger’s
door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside the
vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may be
unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Power Door Lock Switches
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 MPH (24 km/h). Auto door
lock feature is enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings
sections in the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” located
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
and in PARK. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with ChildProtection Door Lock system.
2
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door
Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside with the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door
panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining
on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity
can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and
if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s front
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior
door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature,
which will function if the ignition is OFF.
If one of the vehicle doors is open, and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have
been closed, the vehicle checks the inside and outside of
the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key fob. If one of the
vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fob are
detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System
automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn
three times (on the third attempt, ALL doors will lock, and
the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the vehicle).
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pull the electronic
liftgate handle for a power open on vehicles equipped with
Power Liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle and lift
for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will open
with the handle and no key fob is required.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to the
right of electronic liftgate handle.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when you push the
button on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st Press⬙ is
programmed in Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will unlock
when you push the button on the liftgate. For further
information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle, push
the door handle lock button to lock all four doors and
liftgate.
NOTE: This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the
doors are locked with the door handle lock button. This
feature can be turned on or off. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE: Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle or door handle
button. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle
is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle
reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is dead.
• Closeness to mobile devices can have an effect on the
passive entry system.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob
lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s
interior door panel.
the front and rear passenger door windows. The window
controls will operate only when the keyless push button
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door and rear passenger doors which operate
Power Window Switches
The power window switches remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening a
vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches have
an “Auto-Down” feature. Push the window switch past the
first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate
the switch in either the up or down direction and release
the switch.
To open the window part way, push the switch to the first
detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
2
Auto-Down Window Switches
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
“Auto Up” operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during “Auto
Up,” it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during “Auto-Up.” If this happens, pull the switch lightly
to the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, push the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
push the Window Lockout button again.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window
before closing.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Should the “Auto Up” feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset “Auto Up”:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the passive entry lock button located to the
right of electronic liftgate release switch.
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate handle.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate handle. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate handle to open with one fluid motion.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors First Press” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock when you push the
button on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st Press⬙ is
programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the liftgate will
unlock when you push the button on the liftgate. For
further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel.”
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
1 — Electronic Release Switch
2 — Lock Button Location
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the electronic liftgate release (refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”) or by
pushing the liftgate button on the key fob. Push the liftgate
button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open the
power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pushing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the front overhead
console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be
closed by pushing the liftgate button located on left rear
trim panel, near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in
motion, pushing the liftgate button located on left rear trim
panel will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two
times, the turn signals will flash to signal that the liftgate is
opening or closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in
the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will be
audible. For further information, refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel.⬙
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the
liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftgate
trim panel.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the
liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power
liftgate functionality.
During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage
may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make
sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle
is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22° F (−30° C) or temperatures above 150° F
(65° C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pushing any of the power liftgate
switches.
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will
cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• If the liftgate is not fully open, push the liftgate button
on the key fob twice to operate the liftgate.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
• If the electronic liftgate release is pushed while the
power liftgate is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You
Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer immediately and have it
fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant,
it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use the Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Seat Belt Pretensioner
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.”
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive deployable components,
and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of
the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the
back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the
Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact
requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger
seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of
rear impacts.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not
deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However, if
during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the
AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the
impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
Seatback
Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
Head Restraint Guide Tubes
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s eat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint, ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Supplemental
Active Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a collision, the front half of the head restraint will be extended
forward and separated from the rear half of the head
restraint (see image). Do not drive your vehicle after the
AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must be reset into
the original position to best protect the occupant for all
types of collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer must
reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat
before driving. Personally attempting to reset the AHRs
may result in damage to the AHRs that could impair their
function.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Triggered
• Instrument Panel
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags
will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. For additional information
regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to
the “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
(Continued)
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Knee Impact Bolsters
Supplemental Side Air Bags
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
(Continued)
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs):
Located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side
of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with
such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which could
alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of
the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
(Continued)
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Rollover Events
Air Bag System Components
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type
Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with a seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the belt correctly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Anchors Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see
the following table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether
anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions
(7 Passenger)
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions
(6 Passenger)
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No
N/A —
6 Passenger
No —
7 Passenger
Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
7 Passenger: Use the seat belt and
tether anchor to install a child seat in
the center seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
No — 6 Passenger
Yes — 7 Passenger
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of
the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
7 Passenger: Only the head restraint
in the center position may
be removed.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
2nd Row Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear
seating position located on the back of the seat.
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s Chair)
Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
3rd Row Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating
position located on the back of the seat. To access them,
pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat back, this
will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
2
Tether Anchorages
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access
Top Tether Strap
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the center seat
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
the upward position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the strap
located on the front of the arm rest.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
2
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
No — 6 Passenger
Yes — 7 Passenger
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
7 Passenger: Only the head restraint
in the center position
may be removed.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with
an ALR retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the rear
seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the seat
back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On Seatback)
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Captains Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting
Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING! (Continued)
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph
(80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in period.
Add oil as required.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not
on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” for further
information.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Defroster
Seat Belts
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
your floor mat using
• ALWAYS securely attach
the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor
mat upside down or turn your floor mat over.
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
before installing any
FROM THE VEHICLE
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
(Continued)
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
WARNING! (Continued)
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Rear Cross Path (RCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .98
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .98
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . .116
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .105
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .106
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . .123
3
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Headlight Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Rear Captain’s Chairs — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .131
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Folding Third Row. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
䡵 DRIVER’S MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .134
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . . .144
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . .138
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . . .140
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . . . .141
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . .141
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . .148
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
▫ Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ To Activate/Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .150
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . . . .152
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .153
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . . .159
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . . .160
▫ To Vary The ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . . .164
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . . .168
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC. . . . . . . . .171
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .174
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .177
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
3
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Turning FCW On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .192
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status . . . . .179
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Service FCW Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . . .195
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .197
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . . .198
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .201
▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .191
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .192
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .205
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Front Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped . . . . . .217
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped . . . . . .220
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Cargo Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped . .222
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Relearn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .212
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .226
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Deploying the Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Stowing The Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view
viewing.
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at
the base of the mirror. A light in the button will illuminate
to indicate when the dimming feature is activated.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable
if your Uconnect Access service is active and you are
connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network.
ASSIST Call
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a
9-1-1 button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for Roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for
Uconnect Access.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9-1-1 Call
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the rearview mirror.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system
initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call
connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the rearview
mirror or press the cancellation button on the device
screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off the green
LED light on the rearview mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1
buttons on the rearview mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system will attempt to remain connected with the
9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the
connection.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1
operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The rearview mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The instrument cluster display will show the following
message “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact
your dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the rearview
mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain or tunnels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X(voice/
data) or 3G(data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network connection and a GPS signal is required for the
9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to
center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of
the view obtained on the inside mirror.
The driver’s side mirror will automatically adjust for glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the
inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side
convex mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will not have
a convex passenger side mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push the mirror select button for the mirror that you want
to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror
to move.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Mirror Selection
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Side
Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will be
momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on
both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts
at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify
the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side
of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated or the alert chime remaining on
the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for more information.
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
Stationary Objects
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicles mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
Opposing Traffic
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
RCP is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started, the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is reduced.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
• If the Hazard Warning Flashers are on, the system will
request the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn signal and Hazard signal status is
ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Reclining The Seatback
Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat. The switch is used to control the movement
of the seat and seat cushion.
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
3
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar
support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
raise and lower the position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted forward
or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under the
seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted, and you could be severely injured
or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is
parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be
severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only when
the vehicle is parked.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped
with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or off heat settings. The
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI,
one for LO, and none for off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
• Press the heated seat button
setting on.
once to turn the HI
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting on.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
heating elements off.
a third time to turn the
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may be
equipped with heated seats. There are two heated seat
switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number
of indicator lights changes from two to one, indicating the
change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically
after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO,
and none for OFF.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.
Push the switch a second time to select LO-level
heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
WARNING! (Continued)
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds: HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
the ventilated seat off.
once to choose HI.
a second time to
a third time to turn
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during
a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear-impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
(Continued)
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection
of the head restraint. The Active Head Restraints (AHR)
will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft
foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of
the head restraint extends forward to reduce the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR. This
system is design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver or
front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adjustment Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.
3
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the
head restraints require removal, see your authorized
dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint,
refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head
Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active
Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as
loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint
during sudden stops. Failure to follow this warning
could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat is
folded to a load floor position, but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard head restraints are not removable.
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it or push downward
on the head restraint to lower it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
For improved visibility when in reverse, the third row head
restraints can be folded using the Uconnect System.
Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of the
Uconnect display.
Press the Headrest Fold button
row head restraints.
Rear Head Restraint
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
to power fold the third
NOTE:
• The head restraints can only be folded downward using
the Headrest Fold button. The head restraints must be
raised manually when occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
60/40 Split Rear Seat
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Fold-Flat Second Row Seat
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
3
Tumble Strap
Release Lever
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Raise Rear Seat
Fold the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Tumbled Second Row
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Rear Captain’s Chairs — If Equipped
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
3
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
Release Lever
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
Tumble Strap
WARNING!
Release Lever
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console, there is
a stepping pad to allow passengers to easily access the
third row seats.
WARNING! (Continued)
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat, pull on the release handle
located on back of the seat and lower the seat using the pull
strap located next to the release handle.
Mini Console Stepping Pad
To Raise Rear Seat
Fold the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
(Continued)
Release Handles
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
DRIVER’S MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
Third Row Folded
NOTE: The second row seats must be in their full upright
position or tumbled when folding the third row seats.
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap
located on the back of the seat.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile contains desired position settings for
the driver’s seat, side mirrors, power tilt and telescopic
steering column (if equipped), and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your remote keyless entry key fob can also
be programmed to recall the same positions when the
unlock button is pushed.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other
key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The set (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
• The memory position (1) and memory position (2)
buttons which are used to recall either of two preprogrammed memory profiles.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and telescopic
steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the
memory position buttons (1) or (2). The instrument
cluster display will show which memory position has
been set.
NOTE:
Memory Seat Switch
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position
(Do not start the engine).
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory
profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key
Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob To Memory
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Before programming your key fobs you must select
the “Memory Linked To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile (1) or (2).
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the
set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display
in the instrument cluster.
5. Within 10 seconds, push and release the lock button on
the key fob.
NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10
seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key
fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
memory switch, push memory button number (1) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the
memory switch, push memory button number (2) on the
memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to
memory position 2.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory
buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is
cancelled, the driver’s seat and steering column (if
equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you cycle the
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position, the driver’s seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/
Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the
programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument panel
and in front of the driver’s door.
Safety Latch Location
WARNING!
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
3
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight
switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking
lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights
(if equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (off) position.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not
as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens
cleaning procedures must be followed.
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO
position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on. This feature is programmable through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the daytime, the vehicle will monitor outside brightness and
decide if the instrument panel needs to be dimmed or not.
Refer to “Lights” in this section for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is not in the PARK
position. The lights will remain on until the ignition is
switched to the OFF or ACC position or the parking brake
is engaged. The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to
ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on, and
then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can
be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then
off, or by turning the ignition ON.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The headlight delay time is programmable through
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn
off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to
the O (off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are
on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An
indicator light located in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights
will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time,
when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened or when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to its farthest upward position. If your vehicle is equipped
with a key fob and the unlock button is pushed, the
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is open
and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control
all the way down, to the (O) off detent, will cause all the
interior lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party”
mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer,
radio and overhead console by rotating the control to its
farthest position up until you hear a click. This feature is
termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when headlights
are required during the day.
3
Dimmer Control
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned off, a chime will sound when the
driver’s door is opened.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Battery Saver
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead
console.
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes
or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome
on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
on.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled off,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight
minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for
eight minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility. To turn the lights off, push the switch a second
time. The lights will also turn on when the unlock button
on the key fob is pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Courtesy Lights
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light — If Equipped
Multifunction Lever
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility
of the floor and center console area.
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Ambient Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Turn Signals
Lane Change Assist
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically
turn off.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn signal
is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will turn off on
the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing.
The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on when the
turn signal is turned off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn
on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low
beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever. For information on the rear
wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper operation.
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the park
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the park position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Intermittent Wiper System
Windshield Washer Operation
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving speeds
above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles
(first detent), to a cycle every one second (fourth detent).
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward the
steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the end of
the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the
off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end of the
lever downward to the MIST position and release for a
single wiping cycle.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist Control
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate
this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver desires
less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF
position when not using the system.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
NOTE:
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in the
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate
until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper
operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other
inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen
or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column
in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in this section for
further information.
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for and
average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shutting off. This time may vary based on the temperature of
the surrounding environment or the heated steering wheel
may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
the heating element ON.
once to turn
• Press the heated steering wheel button
to turn the heating element OFF.
a second time
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated
steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a
remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple
speed control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear on the instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is on. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear on the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (–) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message,
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”, will appear
indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator lamp,
along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster display when the speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the
OFF position erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
touchscreen radio settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
touchscreen radio settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot
maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast
for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation
of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for
two seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the brakes
must be applied manually. An audible chime will
sound when the brakes are released.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The cruise control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
3
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
To Activate/Deactivate
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.”
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the “ready” state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is opened at low speeds.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph
(32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
NOTE:
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake force
will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the
brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
WARNING!
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory
if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
To Vary The ACC Speed
To Resume
To Increase Speed
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will show the last set
speed.
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting will show in the instrument cluster display.
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming
to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system will adjust the
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster display will show the “Sensed
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
Brake Alert
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
With Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC With Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC With Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects
(Continued)
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
appears in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC
SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information, refer
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW
operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Offset Driving
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving Condition Example
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turns And Bends
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve, the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
NOTE: On tight turns, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
Turn Or Bend Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Lane Changing
Narrow Vehicles
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Lane Changing Example
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control can only be operated if the
vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
Pushing of the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level
of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the
warnings by braking and the system determines that the
driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not
applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum or partial braking to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
The forward collision button is located in the Uconnect
display in the controls settings.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward collision
button once to turn the system off.
To turn the FCW system back on, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system on.
Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from one
ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting and the
Active Braking is in the “On” setting. This allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to “Far” setting allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warning when the
latter is at a farther distance than ⬙Medium⬙ setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front when the distance between the vehicle in
the front is much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows
for a more dynamic driving experience.
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Service FCW Warning
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
FCW Limited Warning
LaneSense Operation
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality
Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the
vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that
limited the system performance is no longer present, the
system will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through
the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is “off”.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect display.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
LaneSense Warning Button
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
7.0 Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
Lane Sense On Message
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
3
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is on to provide visual warnings in the
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque
is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.).
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with an
Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse
parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision
with an obstacle.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function
by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off via
ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied fast
enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of the
vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
for the automatic braking function through ignition
cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles while in REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle’s movements.
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has been
detected, the warning display will turn on indicating the
system status.
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. Refer
to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the
detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
for further information.
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or
right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
Slow Tone
Single 1/2 Second Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
3
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Rear
Distance
(inches/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Arcs-Left
Greater
than
79 inches
(200 cm)
None
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 inches 47-39 inches
(150-120 cm)
(120-100
cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Slow
Slow
Fast
Fast
Continuous
None
Single 1/2
Second
Tone
None
None
None
None
Arcs-Center
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
Arcs-Right
None
None
None
None
3rd
Flashing
None
Radio Volume Reduced
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect
System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster display will
show a “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display”. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will show the
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues
to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the instrument
cluster display will show a “PARKSENSE OFF” message
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of
the vehicle above the rear license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned on), the rear view image with dynamic grid
lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or
the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the
rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable
to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
(Continued)
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in park, neutral or drive, the Rear View
Camera can be activated with the “Rear View Camera”
in the Controls menu. This feature allows the
button
driver to monitor the area directly behind the vehicle (or
trailer, if equipped) for up to ten seconds while at speed.
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the
Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the “X” button on the
touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink), power liftgate and power sunroof switches
may also be included, if equipped.
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light can
be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of the
console. These buttons are backlit for night time visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Overhead Console
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a
second time.
Courtesy Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Sunglasses Bin Door
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome pad
on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the door to
close.
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (handheld
transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, or sunvisor, designate the three different
HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is located
above the center button.
Sunglasses Bin Door
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the
button that is normally used to open and close the door.
The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling
Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step two and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step two and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
Troubleshooting Tips
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Canadian/
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
Using HomeLink
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the trained device
(i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The handheld
transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING! (Continued)
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
(Continued)
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically
and stop when the full open position is reached. This is
called “Express Open.” During Express Open operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
Pinch Protect Feature
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will move rearward and automatically stop at
full open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.” During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch forward.
The sunroof will move forward and automatically stop at
full closed position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any other
actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Wind Buffeting
Relearn Procedure
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there is a relearn
procedure that allows you to calibrate the sunroof when
the “Express Operation” feature stops working. To reset the
sunroof, follow these steps:
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active in Accessory
Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
1. Set the ignition to the ACC or the ON/RUN position.
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the fully closed position.
3. Push and hold the close switch. The sunroof will hit the
hard stop and move to the vent position after ten
seconds.
4. Release the close switch.
5. Push and hold the close switch again within five seconds to begin the teaching process. The sunroof will
complete one full cycle and return to the fully closed
position.
NOTE: If the close switch is released anytime during the
teach cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated starting
from the first step.
6. Once the sunroof has stopped in the fully closed position, release the close switch. The sunroof is now reset
and ready to use.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while the
outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to
the battery and powered at all times.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do
not insert any other object in the power outlets as this
will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use
of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area on
the center stack of the instrument panel.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element
must be used.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating
is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to
be replaced.
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center console,
there is also a power outlet located in the lower storage
area of the rear full center console.
3
Front Center Console Outlet
Rear Full Center Console Outlet
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel from
fuse location F90 to F91.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
WARNING! (Continued)
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right
Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading
the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices
prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
CUPHOLDERS
Rear Cupholders
Front Seat Cupholders
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers
located in the center console.
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the fold-down center armrest.
Front Cupholder Location
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Full Console Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the front of the rear full console.
The rear full console cupholders are equipped with a light
ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer Control.
Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Full Console Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Full Console Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Rear Mini Console Cupholders — If Equipped
STORAGE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the front of the rear mini console.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
Rear Mini Console Cupholders
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
Front Center Console
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the lid.
Door Panel Storage
Storage Compartment Latches
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower
storage compartment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The rear full center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the front of the lid.
3
Upper Storage Compartment
Storage Compartment
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the lower
storage compartment.
NOTE: Lower storage compartment light is always on with
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders or
devices with cords routing through upper storage area.
Damage may occur to upper console lid and device
cables when upper storage compartment is lifted forward.
Lower Storage Compartment
The upper storage compartment may also be lifted forward. Push in the release button located on the back of the
lid.
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
When lifted forward there is access to the lower storage
compartment.
3
Fold Flat Mode
Lower Storage Compartment
NOTE: When the lower storage compartment is accessed,
it allows the armrest to flip forward for “fold flat mode”.
Fold flat mode allows the console armrest to be lowered
below the fold flat seat plane and protect the armrest vinyl
from damage when using the vehicle to haul cargo.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Open storage areas, or cubby bins with removable liners,
are located rearward of the cupholders and in the lower
front of the console.
Console Cubby Bins
Rear Mini Center Console — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable liner, is
located in the front of the console.
Console Cubby Bin
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
To operate the flashlight, push the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs
and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that
recharge when snapped back into place.
3
Push in on the flashlight to release it.
Three-Push Switch
Push And Release
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Storage
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
There is a removable storage bin located on the left side of
the rear cargo area.
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To access
the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the storage lid.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
WARNING!
Load Floor Handle
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Tie-Down Hooks
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a child
seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a hook
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
(Continued)
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become
a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The
rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located
at the middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more will
activate the washer pump which will continue to
operate as long as the switch is held. Upon release of the
switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper
operation. When this rotary control is in the OFF position,
rotating it downward will activate the rear washer pump
which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Once the switch is released it will return to the OFF
position. The wipers will cycle several times before returning to the parked position.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the switch is
released, the pump will resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Push this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, push
the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within
the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always be used
whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside
the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Deploying the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar.
Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by sliding
the crossbar towards the center of the roof. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
3
Thumb Screw
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Removing Crossbars
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot supports
at each end.
Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on
the side rail.
Bending Pivot
Positioning Crossbars
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Slide the cross bar into to the deploy position by moving it
towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure the
crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed as far
into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar is in place,
tighten both thumb screws completely.
Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the
deployment of the crossbars.
3
Deployed Crossbars
Stowing The Crossbars
Installing Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail. Make
sure the letters on the crossbar align with the matching
letters on the side rail.
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot supports
at each end.
Stowing Crossbars
Crossbar Pivot
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of the
roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
3
Crossbar To Side Rail
Tightening Crossbar
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the
opposite side.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions
when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the side
rails when they are not in use.
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption
of satellite radio reception.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer between the
load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
CAUTION! (Continued)
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps and
thumb wheels frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such as
wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .238
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . .241
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver
Mode Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 5.0 Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 8.4 Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . .269
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .318
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .318
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device. . .318
▫ Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Second Row USB Charging Port . . . . . . . . . . . .319
䡵 UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
▫ Dual Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
䡵 CD/DVD/BLU-RAY DISC MAINTENANCE . . . .337
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .338
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System .327
▫ Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries . . . . . . .329
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV). . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
Instrument Panel
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Ignition Start/Stop Button
9 — Dimmer Switch
10 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
Instrument Cluster
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Instrument Cluster Display
• The Instrument Cluster Display features a driverinteractive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
English
Metric
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD).
CAUTION!
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or
a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 minutes, or until
the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle.
Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Hood Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, a single chime will sound.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn on when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come
on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical
driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible if this occurs.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned
off previously.
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 gal (7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Forward Collision Warning Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact
your local authorized dealer for service.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information,
refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
AWD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
AWD Low Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the all-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. AWD LOW is designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Refer to “All Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on
all-wheel drive operation and proper use.
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service
is required.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the system senses the lane has been approached and is in
a lane departure situation.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service. Please see
your authorized dealer.
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal
as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the speed control has been set.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target Light
This will display the distance setting for the ACC system when the system is engaged. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the adaptive cruise control is on, but not set.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set.
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left or
right lane marking has been detected. When both lanes are detected the telltale will light up
green, and the system will be ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display
if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
The vehicle is equipped with an interactive cluster display,
located in the instrument cluster, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/
OFF position, the opening/closing of a door will activate
the display for viewing, and display the total miles or
kilometers in the odometer.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The Instrument Cluster Display Menu items consists of the
following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
Instrument Cluster Display Location
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push the left arrow button to return to the main
menu from an info screen or submenu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the OK button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
• Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
• Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus available, the position within the submenus is shown here.
• Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
• Gear Selector Status (PRNDL)
• Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy)
• AWD Status — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the
messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. Examples
of this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp
Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is
in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds
and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
message type is “Automatic High Beams On.”
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
display in the Instrument Cluster for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled
oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
Oil Change Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
• Service Power Steering
2. Navigate to ⬙Oil Life⬙ submenu in ⬙Vehicle Info⬙ in the
instrument cluster display.
3. Push and Hold the OK button until the gauge resets to
100%.
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• ACC Override
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH or km/h
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s)
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
• Service Tire Pressure System
Includes the following, but not limited to:
• Park Brake Engaged
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Brake Fluid Low
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Lights On
• Traction Control Off
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Washer Fluid Low
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Oil Pressure Low
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
• Oil Change Due
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Fuel Low
• Ignition or Accessory On
• Service Anti-lock Brake System
• Vehicle Not In Park
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Service Transmission
• Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
• Service Shifter
• Remote Start Canceled Too Cold
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or green telltales area on the right, and the amber or
red telltales area on the left.
• Remote Start Canceled Door Open
• Remote Start Canceled Hood Open
• Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu Items
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
• Service Air Bag System
Speedometer
• Remote Start Canceled Time Expired
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Liftgate Open
• Hood Open
• Shift Not Allowed
• Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
• Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Speedometer icon is displayed in the
Instrument Cluster Display. Push and release the
left or right arrow button to change the speedometer type (Analog or Digital). Push and release the OK button to toggle units (km/h or
MPH) of the speedometer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Vehicle Info
Transmission Temperature
• Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info icon/title is highlighted in
the Instrument Cluster Display. Push the letf or
right arrow button to scroll through the information submenus
Tire Pressure Monitor System
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
• If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire are displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function, and cannot be
reset.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” under
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
Oil Temperature
• Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
• Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist display icon/title is highlighted in the Instrument Cluster Display. For
further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the following:
• Distance
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu icon/title is highlighted. Push the left or right arrow button to
scroll the submenus, one with current fuel
economy display and one without it.
• Range
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Current MPG or L/100 km or km/l
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. The screen will
display the Stop/Start status.
• Average MPG or L/100 km or km/l
• Press the OK button to reset the average fuel economy
NOTE: The Range feature is not able to be reset through
the instrument cluster display controls.
Trip
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the
Instrument Cluster Display, then push and release the left or right arrow button to select Trip
A or Trip B.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in
the Instrument Cluster Display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Stored Messages
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Current Gear
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted.
This feature shows the number of stored warning
messages. Pushing the right arrow button will
allow you to see what the stored messages are.
• On
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope.
• Vehicle Info
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the OK button to enter the submenus
and follow the prompts on the screen as needed. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
location that information is displayed.
• Off (default setting)
Favorite Menus
• Speedometer
• Driver Assist (Show/Hide)
• Fuel Economy (Show/Hide)
• Trip (Show/Hide)
• Stop/Start
• Audio (Show/Hide)
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
NOTE: Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK button
to choose whether to show or hide this menu on the
Instrument Cluster Display.
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Upper Left
• Trip A
• None
• Trip B
• Compass (default setting)
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
• Outside Temp
• Restore
• Time
• Cancel
• Range To Empty (RTE)
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
• Trip A
• Trip B
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default setting)
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Fuel Economy Average
• Fuel Economy Current
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the
instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state
of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate
that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery
Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be affected by load
reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 115V AC Power Inverter System
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads
are larger than the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time
and parking time).
• The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game
consoles and similar devices.
• The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the
evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode”)
CYBERSECURITY
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V,
115V AC, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com/software-update
to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be
assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Privacy Practices - If Equipped
with Uconnect 8.4 Radio” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Buttons On Faceplate And Buttons
On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons
On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument
panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Back
buttons located below the Uconnect system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect
touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to
turn the touchscreen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0
Personal Settings
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety &
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,
Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, Sirius Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal
Data, and System Information.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu
or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the “Up” or “Down” Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the RUN position.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
Selectable Options
Manual
+
Auto
-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
+
Headlights OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Setting Name
Set Language
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español)
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the
instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name
Units
US
Selectable Options
Metric
Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption”
[MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of
measure independently.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Set Time and Format
12 hour
Selectable Options
24 hour
AM
PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
Set Date
Month
Day
Year
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the current date.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines —
If Equipped
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Forward Collision
Warning On/Off —
If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Far
Med
Near
Forward Collision
Warning Sensitivity —
If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front
of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in front of you,
based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you
the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Setting Name
Forward Collision
Warning Active Braking —
If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Active Braking” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies
additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision.
When the “Sound Only” option is selected a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it will apply the
brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
ParkSense — If Equipped
Off
Sound Only
Sound and Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound and Display.”
Rear ParkSense Volume
Low
Medium
High
Rear ParkSense Braking
Assist — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) — If Equipped
Early
Selectable Options
Medium
Late
NOTE:
The “Lane Depature Warning (LDW)” setting determines at what distance the LDW system will warn you, through
steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
Lane Departure Strength
Low
Medium
High
(LDW) — If Equipped
Blind Spot Alert —
Off
Lights
Lights and Chime
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Hill Start Assist —
If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
Paddle Shifters
Enable
Disable
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
Selectable Options
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlights With
Wipers — If
Equipped
Headlight Illumina0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
tion On Approach
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors
are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto High Beam —
On
Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto High Beams” is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Daytime Running
Lights
Flash Lights
With Lock
Selectable Options
Yes
No
On
Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Door Locks” feature locks all doors automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock
On
Off
Horn With Lock
Off
1st Press
2nd Press
Horn With Remote Start
On
Off
— If Equipped
Passive Entry
On
Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Setting Name
Remote Door Unlock/Door
Unlock
Selectable Options
Driver
All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you
must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the doors
will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock
when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening
once. If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key
fob).
Memory Linked To FOB
On
Off
— If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Memory Linked To FOB” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s
seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering
and exiting the vehicle.
Power Liftgate Alert —
On
Off
If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Power Liftgate Alert” feature plays an alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Engine Off Power
Delay — If
Equipped
0 sec
Selectable Options
45 sec
5 min
10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Easy Exit Seat —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the compass variance zone should be set for best results.
Setting Name
Compass Variance
1
2
3
4
5
Selectable Options
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NOTE:
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to 15
per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences,
the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most accurate compass
headings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
4
Compass Variance Zone Map
Compass Calibration
Yes
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Equalizer
Bass
Adjustable Options
Mid
Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade
Up Arrow
Down ArLeft Arrow
Right ArCenter “C”
Button
row Button
Button
row Button
Button
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the “Arrow” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the “Center ‘C’ Button”
on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
3
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
Loudness — If Equipped
Yes
No
NOTE:
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Setting Name
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
Adjustable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input
Phone/Bluetooth
4
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones
Selectable Options
List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information,
refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Channel Skip
Selectable Options
List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Subscription Info
Selectable Options
Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Cancel
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
System Information
Selectable Options
System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see your Authorized Dealer
for further information.
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4
Personal Settings
NOTE:
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings”
button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,
Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM
Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option” until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
either press the “Back” Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
“Up” or “Down” Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
Selectable Options
Night
Day
+
Auto
-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
+
Headlights OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection,
press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Set Language
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep
Control Screen Time-Out —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster — If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the
instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name
Units
US
Selectable Options
Metric
Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Speed” (MPH, or km/h), “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption”
[MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L], “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of
measure independently.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Sync Time With GPS
Set Time Hours
Selectable Options
+
-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes
+
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format
12hrs
24hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera
Delay — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guide Lines —
If Equipped
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Forward Collision Warning On/Off — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Far
Med
Near
Forward Collision
Warning-Plus (FCW+) —
If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle
directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly
in front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas
“Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Setting Name
Forward Collision
Warning-Plus (FCW+)
Active Braking —
If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Sound Only
Sound and Brake
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision.
When the “Sound Only” option is selected a chime will sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it will apply the
brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
ParkSense — If Equipped
Off
Sound Only
Sound and Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It will provide an alert (audible and/or
visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with “Sound Only,” or “Sound and Display.”
Rear ParkSense
Low
Medium
High
Chime Volume
Front ParkSense
Low
Medium
High
Chime Volume
Rear ParkSense Braking
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Assist — If Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
LaneSense Warning —
Early
Medium
Late
If Equipped
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LanSense system will warn you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength —
Low
Medium
High
If Equipped
Blind Spot Alert —
Off
Lights
Lights and Chime
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Setting Name
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
Hill Start Assist —
If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
Paddle Shifters
Selectable Options
Enable
4
Disable
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
Selectable Options
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlights With
Wipers —
If Equipped
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Headlight Illuminated On Approach
0 sec
Selectable Options
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time
the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Auto Dim High
On
Off
Beams —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running
Yes
No
Lights —
If Equipped
Flash Lights
On
Off
With Lock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Name
Flash Lights With Lock
Sound Horn With Lock
Sound Horn With Remote Start
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Selectable Options
Off
Driver Door
1st Press
2nd Press
All Doors
NOTE:
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the key fob unlock button. You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob
unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s
door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can
be used to unlock all doors (or use the key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Setting Name
Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob —
If Equipped
Selectable Options
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Lift Gate Chime — If Equipped
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto-On Driver Heated/
Ventilated Seat & Steering
Wheel With Vehicle Start
— If Equipped
Off
Selectable Options
Remote Start
All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn
ON.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Engine Off Power
Delay —
If Equipped
0 sec
Selectable Options
45 sec
5 min
10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system
(if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
remain on after the engine is shut off.
Easy Exit Seat —
If Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
Selectable Options
Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
Equalizer
Bass
Mid
Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Off
1
2
3
Surround Sound — If Equipped
On
Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
+
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Settings
After pressing the “Phone Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Do Not Disturb
Selectable Options
List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto
Reply Message (custom, default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones and Audio Sources
List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and
Audio Sources Settings system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Tune Start
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using
one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you
will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Setting Name
Channel Skip
Selectable Options
List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info
Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the “Accessibility” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Accessibility
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE:
The “Accessibility” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray
functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the “Play” button is selected, the system will announce “Play button selected”, and then once pressed again the “Play” button will perform its action.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
OK
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Cancel
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
OK
Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
System Information
Selectable Options
System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying
the system software version. You can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see your Authorized Dealer
for further information.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external
USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX connector port which
is located in the center console.
IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the lower section of
the front integrated center stack, in front of the rotary
transmission gear selector.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and
iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully
support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX SD Card Media HUB
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicles iPod/USB/MP3 control system (iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the
audio device starts charging and is ready for use.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod/USB/MP3
control system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod/USB/MP3
control system may charge it to the required level.
Second Row USB Charging Port
Second row USB connector ports can be used for charging
purposes only. Use the connection cable to connect an iPod
or external USB device to the vehicle’s USB charging ports
which are located either on the rear of the front center
console and/or in the second row center console.
Using This Feature
By using an iPod cable, or an external USB device to
connect to the USB port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into the
USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific audio
device).
NOTE: For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Front Center Console Rear USB Ports
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Getting Started
• Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats: Open the
LCD screen cover by lifting up on cover.
Second Row Center Console USB Port
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE)
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to give
your family years of enjoyment. You can play your favorite
CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs, listen to audio over the
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of standard video games or audio devices. Please review this
Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features and
operation.
RSE System Screen
• Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position.
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a Blu-ray Disc
Player. If equipped with a Blu-ray Disc Player, the icon
will be present on the Player.
• Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment system by pushing
the Power button on the remote control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
• When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD/Blu-ray
Disc is inserted into the Disc player, the screen(s) turn(s)
ON automatically, the headphone transmitters turn ON
and playback begins.
4
RSE System Remote Control Channel Selectors
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
• With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 (Rear 1)
on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen
1 (driver’s side) and Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the Remote
Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (passenger
side).
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blu-ray Disc Player
Play A Blu-ray Disc
The Blu-ray Disc player is located in the center console.
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
• The system can be controlled by the front seat occupants
utilizing either the touchscreen radio, or by the rear seat
occupants using the remote control.
Dual Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Blu-ray Disc Player Location
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc into the VES disc player with the
label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray player. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen, the language screen, or starts playing the first track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Rear 1.
Using The Touchscreen Radio
3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Rear 2 for passenger side rear
passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Rear 2.
4
NOTE:
• To view a Blu-ray disc on the radio, press the “Media”
button on the touchscreen, and then press the “Disc”
button. Press the “Play” button, and then the “full
screen” button.
• Viewing a Blu-ray disc on the radio screen is not
available in all states/provinces. The vehicle must be
stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
position for vehicles with automatic transmission.
Rear Media Control Screen
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 1/Channel 1. This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is
not highlighted, select button to access controls for Screen
1/Channel 1 source.
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. RSE Mute
8. RSE Mode
Mute rear headphones for the current ignition cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute rear headphones.
Select this button to change source for the active (highlighted) rear Screen/Channel on the rear media control
screen.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock Out
Press to enable/disable Remote Control functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/Channel 2. This
button will be highlighted when it is the active Screen/
Channel being controlled by the front user. If this button is
not highlighted, select button to access controls for Screen
2/Channel 2 source.
6. Radio Full Screen Mode
Select this button to change to Full Screen Mode.
7. Cabin Audio Mode
Select this button to change the cabin audio to the rear
entertainment source currently shown on the rear media
control screen.
• Press the Media button on the touchscreen, and then
press the Rear Media button on the touchscreen.
• Press the OK button on the touchscreen to begin playing
the Blu-ray Disc on the touchscreen radio.
Using The Remote Control
• Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s side rear
screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s side rear screen), and
then press the source key, and using the up and down
arrows, highlight disc from the menu and press the OK
button.
• Press the popup/menu key to navigate the disc menu
and options.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Play Video Games
1. HDMI Input.
Connect the video game console to the Audio/Video
RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side of each seat.
2. Right audio in (red).
3. Left audio in (white).
4. Video in (yellow).
NOTE: Certain high-end video game consoles may exceed
the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Disc Using The Touchscreen
Radio
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI Jacks) on
the side of each seat enable the monitor to display video
directly from a video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3
player.
When connecting an external source to the AUX/HDMI
input, ensure to follow the standard color coding for the
audio/video jacks:
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray Disc with the label facing as
indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray Disc player. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 1 (driver’s side
rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray Disc on Rear 2 (passenger’s
side rear passenger), ensure the Remote Control and
Headphone channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Remote Control
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote Control.
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect radio touchscreen.
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either
pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons, then push
ENTER/OK.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment Screen
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the Rear Media
Control screen.
Rear Media Control Screen
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen, and the
select source button on the touchscreen. Press the DISC
button on the touchscreen in the MEDIA column. To
exit, press the X at the top right of the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System
• The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able to transmit
two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
• The Blu-ray Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs and
Blu-ray Discs.
• When selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video source
will display on Rear 1 and can be heard on Rear 1.
• When selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video source
will display on Rear 2 and can be heard on Rear 2.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
NOTE: Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or
Blu-ray Disc is playing, brings up the basic remote control
functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner will
turn OFF the remote control screen functions.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even when
the screen(s) are closed.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blu-ray Disc Player Remote Control — If Equipped
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch — Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control. When
the selector switch is in the Rear 1 position, the remote
controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (left
screen). When the selector switch is in the Rear 2
position, the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (right screen).
5. 䉴 — Push to navigate menus.
6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings menu.
7. 䉴䉴 — Push and hold to fast forward through the
current audio track or video chapter.
Blu-ray Player Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power button
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a button is pushed,
the currently affected channel or channel button is
illuminated momentarily.
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access Blu-ray Disc
features.
10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat and shuffle
options, the Blu-ray Disc popup menu, the DVD title
menu, or to access disc menus.
11. KEYPAD — Push to navigate chapters or titles.
12. ▪ (Stop) — Stops disc play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
13. 䉳䉳 — Push and hold to fast rewind through the
current audio track or video chapter.
14.
— Mutes headphone audio.
15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return to source
selection screen.
16. 䉲 — Push to navigate menus.
17. OK — Push to select the highlighted option in a menu.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on, the channel is not muted
and the headphone channel selector switch is on the
desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
18. 䉳 — Push to navigate menus.
19. 䉱 — Push to navigate menus.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system is
turned off.
3. Pushing the SOURCE button will advance to the next
mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, use
the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to
the available modes and push the OK button to select
the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector
switch.
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
NOTE:
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are
tuned to the audio on Channel 1.
• When both the headphone and the remote control
channel selector switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are
tuned to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Push the SOURCE button on the remote control.
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Accessibility
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD system that announces
a function prior to performing the action. For further
information refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers the
initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this particular
Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless headphone
(⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as
long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use
is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty does
not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse,
abuse or modification of the Product other than by Unwired.
Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal
use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS
NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO
PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF,
OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR
IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may
not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired Do? Unwired, at its option, will repair
or replace any defective Product. Unwired reserves the
right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY
REGARDING
DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-3332
or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired wireless headphones by
phone at 1-888-293-3332.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s POP UP/MENU button displays a list
of all commands which control playback of the disc.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (Blu-ray Disc or DVD Video
with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the
remote control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the
video on the screen. The factory default settings are already
set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change
these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then push the remote
control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the value for
the currently selected item. To reset all values back to the
original settings, select the Default Settings menu option
and push the remote control’s ENTER/OK button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray Disc player’s
settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
Video Screen Display Settings
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• To change the current audio mode, push the remote
control’s SOURCE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the Mode/
Source Select menu.
• CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
DVD Region Codes
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push the
remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If audio is
still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are
installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of the playing the
following types of 4.7 in (12 cm) diameter discs :
• BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
• DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC, AVCHD,
DVD-VR
• DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX (versions 3 – 6)
profile 3.0
The Blu-ray Disc player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in order
for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does
not match the region code for the player, the disc will not
play.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the Blu-ray Disc
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program material
is automatically mixed down to two channels, which may
result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you increase
the volume level to account for this change in level,
remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or
to another mode.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray Disc player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CDROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will also
play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW
disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not
supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the Blu-ray Disc player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To help
avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines
when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed
are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDAudio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other
formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not supported.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the
Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable
in the Blu-ray Disc player, check with the disc recording
software publisher for more information about burning
playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The Blu-ray Disc player is capable of playing MP3
(MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media
Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
CD-RW).
• The Blu-ray Disc player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA files
must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or ⬙.WMA⬙.
To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these extensions for any other types of files.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as artist
name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play. The
Blu-ray player will automatically skip the file and begin
playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg
Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The Blu-ray player
will automatically skip the file and begin playing the
next available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended sample
rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
Blu-ray Disc player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next
file, or the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current
or previous file.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray Disc player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc
Error⬙ message is displayed on the rear screen and Radio
displays. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are
all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for two seconds, the Blu-ray Disc
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by skipping forward one to three seconds at a time. If the end of
the disc is reached, the Blu-ray Disc player will return to
the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of
the first track.
The Blu-ray Disc player may shut down during extremely
hot conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120° F (48.9° C). When this occurs, the
player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the Rear
Seat displays until a safe temperature is reached. This
shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the Blu-ray
Disc player.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended
for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright
1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right reserved.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SXM/CD/
AUX/VES, etc.).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
CD/DVD/BLU-RAY DISC MAINTENANCE
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
Radio Operation
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
To keep a CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc in good condition, take
the following precautions:
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
CD Player
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go
to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within one second after the
current track begins to play.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Regulatory And Safety Information
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 inches (20 centimeters) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for
help.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout
the vehicle. The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio.
Overview
5.0 Temperature Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
4
8.4/8.4 NAV Temperature Controls
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Icon
REAR CLIMATE
Description
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. When toggling the
front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns OFF after 10 minutes.
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate
when the rear climate controls are ON.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Description
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the Up button on
the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or the Down button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings. On the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings or towards the blue arrow button on
the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s
temperature will move up or down with the driver’s temperature, when it is adjusted.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator
is illuminated when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The Sync feature also synchronizes the rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Icon
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Description
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon
Description
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
CAUTION!
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Uconnect 5.0 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR CLIMATE⬙ button on the touchscreen
to change control to rear control mode, Rear display
(below) will appear. Control functions now operate rear
system.
• To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect 8.4 radio,
press the ⬙Front Climate⬙ button on the touchscreen. To
return to the Front screen on the Uconnect 5.0 radio,
press the “Done” button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon
Headliner
Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
78º
Description
Rear Mode Controls
Select the desired air distribution mode from the selectable modes on the touchscreen. The rear airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the headliner outlets, and floor outlets.
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of
the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Display
This display shows the temperature setting for the rear seat occupants.
Blower Control Display
This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Icon
Description
Rear Auto Indicator
This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.
Rear Lock Button
Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings.
Front Climate Button/Done Button
Press and release to return to the Front Climate Control Screen.
Done
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Manual Temperature Control
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated
air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are located on
the headliner on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Icon
Description
Rear Mode Control
Select the desired air distribution mode using the Mode Control Knob. The rear airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the headliner outlets, and floor outlets.
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Floor Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of
the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, turn the Temperature Control Knob. Turn it
to the right to raise the temperature, or turn it to the left to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head. When rear controls are locked by the front system,
the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the control head is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Icon
Description
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by rotating the
Blower Control Knob in the rear of the vehicle. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear
display. The rear temperature and air source are controlled
from the front Uconnect system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center of
the vehicle.
• Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the Uconnect
touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock
icon in the rear temperature knob.
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the Rear
Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System
will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level.
When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not
necessary to change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is
ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the
word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC display,
along with two temperatures for the driver and front
passenger. The system will then automatically regulate
the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain, by adjusting the driver, passenger, and rear
temperatures. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and
fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing
the front blower knob setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any
fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of
air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in the
right side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push
the temperature buttons. The rear temperature settings are
displayed in the rear ATC panel.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the Rear
Temperature Lock symbol on the ATC panel is illuminated
and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
When the Sync feature is active, the rear temperature is
synchronized to the driver’s temperature setting. If the rear
temperature is changed, the Sync feature will deactivate.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. A
solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed
by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor
mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and
provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed. Vehicle windows
tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid
weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
filtered out. Refer to “Maintenances Procedure” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
Control Settings Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions Chart
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
1. Press the “Apps
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
” button to open the App screen.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the
main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or 8.4/8.4
NAV system.
4
Uconnect 8.4 NAV
Uconnect 5.0
icon on your touchscreen, you have the
If you see the
Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect
8.4 system.
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned in the
center stack and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions. For
8.4/8.4 NAV Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
4
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4 /8.4 NAV
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
Uconnect 5.0
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
and say
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
4
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Uconnect 5.0 Media
Push the Phone button
following commandsѧ
. After the beep, say one of the
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
and say Listen. (Must have compatible
Phone button
mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
Start without
No.
me.
Okay.
Where are you?
Are you there
Call me.
yet?
I need
I’ll call you later.
directions.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
RESPONSES
See you later.
4
I’ll be late.
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of
the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this
feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
Turn On “Show Notifications”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate
Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the
Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation
at any time.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
beep, say:
. After the
• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
4
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After
Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation
Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Voice Texting
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on
the next page.
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
Roadside Assistance Call
**If vehicle is equipped.
***Extra charges apply.
Register (8.4/8.4 NAV)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Vehicle Finder
Send ‘N Go
Yelp Search
Assist Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
4
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and sending a destination from your phone to your
vehicle.
Mobile App
To use the Uconnect Access Mobile App::
• Once you have registered your Uconnect Access services, download the Uconnect Access app to your mobile device. Use your Owner Account login and password to open the app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send ‘n Go , if equipped.
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text
messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of
the app to bring up app settings
Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say the following command: “Send message to
John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message
you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process
your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with
your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
Turn On “Show Notifications”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if your
vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
4
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen,
, then say: “YELP search.”
push the VR button
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like Uconnect
to find.
Yelp
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not
available for 8.4 system or vehicles sold in the Canadian
market.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
4
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages, and many
other useful requests.
Siri Eyes Free Available
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Getting Started
Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone.
Voice Recognition/Siri Buttons
Siri Enable Screens
1 — Select Settings On Your
iPhone
2 — Select General
3 — Select Siri
4 — Enable Siri
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound
system. Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for a detailed pairing procedure.
1 — Phone Pick Up Button
2 — Voice Recognition/Siri Eyes Free Button
3 — Phone Hang Up Button
NOTE: A push and release of the
button will start
normal embedded VR functions. The push and hold,
button will start Siri functions.
then release of the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• ⬙Play Rolling Stones⬙
• ⬙Send text message to John⬙
• ⬙Read text message from Sarah⬙
4
• ⬙Take me to the nearest coffee shop⬙
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead to ensure your command is
understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
Siri Eyes Free
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Do Not Disturb
NOTE:
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Automatic reply messages can be:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
General Information
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . .389
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .389
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C) . .386
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .391
▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . .387
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
䡵 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does
Not Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . .388
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . . .389
▫ Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . .400
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ When To Use LOW Range — If Equipped . . . . .404
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Driving Through Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand. . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Hill Climbing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ After Driving Off-Road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST). . . . . . . . . . . . .420
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . .411
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . . . .411
▫ Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . .433
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles. . . . . . . . .450
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .450
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . .441
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . .442
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Service TPM System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
▫ TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . .447
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
▫ Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Towing Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
䡵 SNOW PLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .469
▫ Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node is
in the “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above idle
speed.
(Continued)
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
This feature allows the driver to operate
the ignition switch with the push of a
button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Do not press the accelerator. Use the fob with Integrated
Key to briefly place the ignition in the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs, place the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle.
If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short
pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position until the
gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice
to the OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the instrument cluster display will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position,
or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button with the vehicle speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition will remain in the ACC position.
NOTE: If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and
START. To change the ignition positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position.
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster
display will display “ACC”).
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to
place the ignition to the RUN position (instrument
cluster display will display “ON/RUN”).
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument
cluster display will display “OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures,
it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
pedal will automatically restart the engine.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and the brake
pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
Automatic Mode
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if
all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations, the engine
will not stop:
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section.
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable
cabin temperature has not been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
• Hood is open.
• The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
• 5 MPH threshold not achieved from previous AUTOSTOP.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applications).
• ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times
without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back
on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
STOP/START Off Switch
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system), the engine will not be stopped.
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
three-wire extension cord.
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
• 3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the engine oil
dipstick tube.
• 5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord
before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical
cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
WARNING! (Continued)
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
park brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK (P).
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the vehicle’s
overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions.
Push the “eco” switch in the center stack of the instrument
panel to activate or disable ECO mode. A light on the
switch indicates when ECO mode is disabled.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
Fuel Economy Mode Switch
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is engaged, the
vehicle control systems will change the following:
• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift
later.
• The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
• Some ECO mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and other factors.
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster display. To select a
gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK,
or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
“Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick shift control (shift paddles
mounted on the steering wheel). Pressing the shift paddles
(-/+) while in the DRIVE range will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “AutoStick” in this section for
further information.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
Electronic Gear Selector
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the electronically
shifted transfer case, ensure that the transfer case is in
AWD AUTO or LOW RANGE position on the AWD
Control Switch. Ensure that the NEUTRAL position light is
NOT illuminated.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before
exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
WARNING! (Continued)
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage
the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL (N)
DRIVE (D)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the
vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to AutoStick in this section for further information) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch
is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the engine
may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may
be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
When the transmission is in DRIVE, it will operate automatically, shifting between the eight available gears. To
engage AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering wheelmounted shift paddles (+/-). Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick
mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower
gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain
the current gear. When AutoStick is active, the current
transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: The shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled,
as desired) using the Uconnect Personal Settings.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the (+) shift
paddle until ⬙D⬙ is once again indicated in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems are
all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide
improved throttle response and modified shifting for an
enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount
of steering feel. This mode may be activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on the instrument panel
switch bank.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
— If Equipped
This system contains a single-speed (HI range only) transfer case, which provides convenient full-time all-wheel
drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake Traction
Control (BTC) System, which combines standard ABS and
Traction Control, provides resistance to any wheel that is
slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with
traction.
NOTE: This system is not appropriate for conditions
where LOW range is recommended. Refer to “Off-Road
Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (ThreePosition Switch) — If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is operated by
the AWD Control Switch, which is located on the center
console.
AWD Control Switch (Three-Position)
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three
mode positions:
• All-wheel drive automatic range (AWD AUTO)
• All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the AWD AUTO position for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads.
For variable driving conditions, the AWD AUTO mode can
be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. All-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
LOW RANGE position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
rotating the AWD Control Switch to the desired position.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shifting instructions. The LOW RANGE position is designed for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the LOW RANGE
position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased
tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages (AWD
AUTO and LOW RANGE) are located in the instrument
cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case
selection. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When you select a different transfer case position, the
position indicator lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue
to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the
control knob back to the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements,
refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer case,
located in this section of the owner’s manual.
The “SERV AWD” Warning Light monitors the electronic
shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the all-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and
that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to
driveline components.
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the AWD AUTO
position at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed
the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer
case.
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
AWD Auto
All-Wheel Drive Auto Range – This range sends power to
the rear wheels. The all-wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
LOW Range
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range provides low
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear driveshafts
together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
NEUTRAL – This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing
behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages
both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met. To retry a
shift: return the control switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the AWD control switch to the
desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in ON/ RUN position and
engine running, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
AWD Auto To Low Range
3. Rotate the AWD control switch to the desired position.
NOTE: When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt
is in process, the desired position indicator light will
flash continuously while the original position indicator
light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the RUN position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to
be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the RUN
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
For information regarding the transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
shift procedure, refer to “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” in
“Recreational Towing”.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary
vehicles.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily
in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns
or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use LOW Range — If Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to LOW for additional traction. This range should be limited to extreme situations
such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional low
speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in LOW range.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range locks
front and rear drivelines together and does not allow
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
WARNING! (Continued)
for differential action between the front to rear driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will cause
driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water,
there are a number of precautions that must be considered
before entering the water.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering, as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave
effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off),
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing water avoid
depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). The flowing water can
erode the streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream
of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in (51 cm),
and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is less than
5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through
water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent
component damage.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
WARNING!
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to LOW if necessary. Refer
to “All-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear
than necessary to maintain forward motion. Over-revving
the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight
down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill
in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill; always
drive straight up or down.
Hill Climbing
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill,
ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by
turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh
“bite” into the surface and will usually provide traction to
complete the climb.
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to LOW. Use first gear
and LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine, and shift into
REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill, allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the
brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply them
lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer case
into LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill
with all four wheels turning against engine compression
drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and
direction.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can
cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Programmable Features” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF –
SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed within
the instrument cluster, this indicates the vehicle needs to be
taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY —
IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off
four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load and
cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver
inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the
PARK position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower
left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park
brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time
and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission
is placed in gear, the “Brake” Warning Light will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting
to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the ON position, the “Brake” Warning Light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the “Brake” Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), and Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of
the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent
the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come
on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one
or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon
as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the
brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Towing With HSA
Disabling And Enabling HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster
display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within twenty
seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on
and turn off two times.
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS
and ESC are in a reduced mode.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to return
to ESC On.
NOTE:
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC
OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It
should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in
the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when
TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer
Towing” in this section for further information. When TSC
is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and
you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels
to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to reach
full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver.
The EBC will prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance in
wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are
in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives that
the feature is active is the torque applied to the steering
wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the
DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity
and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its
load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed
limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
WARNING!
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions. Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure. Unequal tire
pressures can cause steering problems. You could
lose control of your vehicle. Over-inflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Always
drive with each tire inflated to the recommended
cold tire inflation pressure.
5
Tire And Loading Information Placard
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”,
or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Owner’s Information kit.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in
“Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supplement located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further
information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Economy
CAUTION!
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
judgement when determining proper
may look properly inflated even when
inflated.
a good quality
make a visual
inflation. Tires
they are under-
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Types
WARNING!
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure
adversely affect the safety and handling of
designation or
sidewall. Use
to do so may
your vehicle.
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section
located in your Owner’s Information kit for further information.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style.
Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
Life Of Tire
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on rear tires only.
• Due to limited clearance, the THULE XG-12 PRO traction device or equivalent is recommended on P265/
60R18 or 265/50R20 tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between
tires and other suspension components, it is important
that only traction devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
Tire Rotation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
following components:
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
• Receiver Module.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the instrument cluster, and a graphic
displaying tire pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour
period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold
tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated
tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have
been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance. The TPM sensor
is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and
may contribute to a poor overall system performance
or sensor damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor
function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible
chime will be activated, when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message, an ⬙Inflate
to XXX⬙ message and a graphic display of the pressure
value(s) with the low tire(s) displayed in a different color.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units in
PSI, BAR or kPa.
5
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active
road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate
the low tire(s) that is in a different color on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
displayed in the ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update, the graphic display
of the pressure value(s) will return to its original color and
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
Service TPM System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime.
The instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in
place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
will not be present, and a pressure value will be displayed
instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any of the
following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in the
spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON, a chime will
sound, and the instrument cluster will still display a
pressure value in the different color graphic display and an
⬙Inflate to XXX kPa⬙ message will be displayed. After
driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. For each
subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value. Once you repair or replace the
original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn OFF and the graphic in the instrument cluster will
display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPM
telltale and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
in the instrument cluster display but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off, and the instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message. The instrument cluster will also
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of higher octane “Premium” gasoline will not provide
any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline
is
recommended.
Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause
the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
MMT In Gasoline
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
(Continued)
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle to
allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
• Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door
using the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
• A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
• Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
• Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe
seals the system.
• Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
• Pour fuel into funnel opening.
• Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting
back in the spare tire storage area.
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage bin to the
center, this will pop up the outboard edge.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door, push the
release cable back to the home position to re-seat the fuel
door latch to the closed position.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
Release Cable
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
NOTE: If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
release cable has been activated, the actuator latch should
be manually returned to the closed position.
Payload
VEHICLE LOADING
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Certification Label
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Tire Size
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) or more,
it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to
ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
Weight-Carrying Hitch
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is supported by a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch
receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while
traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine
3.6L
3.6L
3.6L
3.6L
5.7L
5.7L
GCWR (Gross
Max. GTW
Combined Wt.
Frontal Area
(Gross Trailer
Rating)
Wt.)
RWD Light Duty
8,900 lbs
40 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Cooling
(4,037 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(1,588 kg)
RWD
11,600 lbs
40 sq ft
6,200 lbs
(5,262 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(2,812 kg)
AWD Light Duty
8,900 lbs
40 sq ft
3,500 lbs
Cooling
(4,037 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(1,588 kg)
AWD
11,600 lbs
40 sq ft
6,200 lbs
(5,262 kg)
(3.72 sq m)
(2,812 kg)
RWD
13,100 lbs
60 sq ft
7,400 lbs
(5,942 kg)
(5.57 sq m)
(3,357 kg)
AWD
13,100 lbs
60 sq ft
7,200 lbs
(5,942 kg)
(5.57 sq m)
(3,266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Model
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
350 lbs (159 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
350 lbs (159 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
740 lbs (336 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in this section for further information. The
addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing
trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW).
Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to
avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of 3,900 lbs (1 769 kg).
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the bottom of
the hitch receiver cover a 1/4 turn counterclockwise and
pull bottom of the hitch receiver cover outward (towards you).
5
• Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package
are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs tongue weight).
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch receiver
cover, this must be removed to access the trailer hitch
receiver (if equipped). This cover is located at the bottom
center of the rear fascia.
Hitch Receiver Cover Retainers
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards you) then
downwards to disengage the tabs located at the top of
the hitch receiver cover to remove.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch or the weights specified in the information that can be found under “Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)”.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the procedure in
reverse order.
NOTE: Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver cover
in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factoryinstalled options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
NOTE: Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading
Information Placard” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed
the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and
will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that
is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that
may be difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
(Continued)
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always block
or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for the proper inspection
procedure.
1. GVWR
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
2. GTW
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
3. GAWR
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
(If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and
backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic.
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Automatic Transmission
Speed Control — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
AutoStick
City Driving
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
Air Conditioning
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Turn off temporarily.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOW PLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly
or could fail to deploy during a collision.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels
OFF The
Ground
NONE
Dolly Tow
Front
On Trailer
Rear
ALL
Rear-Wheel
Drive Models
NOT
ALLOWED
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Single-Speed Transfer Case
All-Wheel Drive Models With
Two-Speed Transfer Case
NOT ALLOWED
NOT
ALLOWED
OK
OK
NOT ALLOWED
• See Instructions
• Transmission In PARK
• Transfer Case In NEUTRAL
(N)
• Tow In Forward Direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — Rear-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This
may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission
into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing,
to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do not
have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case)
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing.
The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the selector switch
in any mode position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any AWD vehicle. Towing with
only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)
will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle
backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer
case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL(N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N).
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine
running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located
by the selector switch) for four seconds. The light
behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift in
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid)
when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A “FOUR
WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
5. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
8. Shift the transmission back into NEUTRAL.
9. Firmly apply the parking brake.
10. With the transmission and transfer case in NEUTRAL,
push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
the engine turns off. Turning the engine off will automatically place the transmission in PARK.
11. Push the ENGINE STOP/START button again (without
pressing the brake pedal), if needed, to turn the ignition to the OFF mode.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
13. Release the parking brake.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
NOTE:
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
• Steps 1 through 3 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push and hold
the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button (located
by the selector switch) for one second.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off,
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK and turn the engine OFF.
10. Release the brake pedal.
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If
any of these requirements are not met before pushing
the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during
the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
• The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .476
䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .477
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .478
䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . . .494
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Rear Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ All-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
䡵 CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .501
6
476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch
bank just above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may discharge the battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT
(H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
6
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
22 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
Torque Patterns
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located in
rear cargo area, below the load floor.
6
Thumb Screw Location
Spare Tire Stowage
Jack Storage Location
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack to
loosen the jack and remove from the bracket.
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow the
spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to the
square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire drive” nut.
The nut is located under a plastic cover at the center-rear of
the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate opening.
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from storage
compartment floor.
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use the
lug wrench handle and extension to completely lower
the spare tire. Keep turning the handle until the winch
stops.
Spare Tire Location
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it
vertically behind the rear bumper.
5. Spread the retaining tabs on the plastic plate and pull
the metal stamping toward you to release it from the
plastic plate.
6
Spare Tire
Tab Location
482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube and
winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping and push it
through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the
protective plate from the steel spare wheel.
Releasing Protective Plate
Sleeve And Cable
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
6
484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is still
on the ground.
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack Warning Label
Jack And Tool Assembly
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485
3. For the front tire, place the jack on the body flange just
behind the front tire. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is fully engaged.
6
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
Front Jack Location
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install the
lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug nut torque. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool from
inside the aluminum road wheel and position the
wheel behind the rear bumper with the protective plate
facing outward.
Mounting Spare Tire
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
6
Installing Protective Plate On Damaged Wheel
Installing Winch
NOTE: The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel from
being scratched when sliding it under the vehicle.
12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protective plate until it is directly under the winch and
between the rear bumper and exhaust system heat
shields. Raise the tire by turning the lug wrench on the
winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets three
times to make sure the cable is tight.
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective plate
in the lug holes of the road wheel. Push the end of the
winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and stamped cone
shape wheel plate though the road wheel and protective plate.
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the
tools to the proper positions in the tool bag. Fold the
flap on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools in
the bag underneath the others. Use the Velcro straps to
secure the tool bag to the jack with the lug wrench on
the forward side of the jack. Expand the jack on the
bracket by turning the thumb screw clockwise until it is
tight to prevent rattles.
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack
in the rear storage bin.
NOTE: Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable may
result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire, jack
and tool kit.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact-type tools may damage the winch mechanism.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
Road Tire Installation
CAP-LESS FUEL FILL FUNNEL
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located with the
jack and tire changing tools. If your vehicle is out of fuel
and an auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into
the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
WARNING!
Refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting And Operating ” for
more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
6
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Fuel Funnel
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING
Preparations For Jump-Start
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jumpstarting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s
front seat. There are remote locations located under the
hood to assist in jump-starting.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
NOTE: Be sure that the disconnected ends of the cables do
not touch while still connected to either vehicle.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
CAUTION!
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove it.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while
making connections.
6
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2000 rpm
since it provides no charging benefit, wastes fuel and
can damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system tested at
your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again
to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
6
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle.
The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
2. Open the center console and locate the Manual Park
Release cover, remove it by snapping the cover away
from the console hinges.
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those
in or around the vehicle.
6
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a
Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Manual Park Release Cover
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the metal latch
in towards the tether strap.
Released Position
Release Latch
4. While the metal latch is in the open position, simultaneously pull upwards on the tether strap until the lever
clicks and latches in the released position. The transmission is now out of PARK and the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park Release is
activated may damage the Manual Park Release
mechanism, the transmission, and/or the armrest.
NOTE: To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintentionally,
firmly apply the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release Lever, apply
tension upward while pushing the release latch towards
the tether to unlock the lever.
6
Stowed Position
NOTE: Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back in
place.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Release Latch
2. Once the tension has been released and the lever has
been unlocked, be sure it is stowed properly and locks
into position.
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may
also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in
the “Starting and Operating” section.
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels
OFF The
Ground
NONE
Rear-Wheel Drive
Models
•
•
•
Wheel Lift
Or Dolly
Tow
Front
•
•
•
Flatbed
Rear
ALL
If Transmission
Is Operable:
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
30 miles (48 km)
max distance
If Transmission
Is Operable:
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
30 miles (48 km)
max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
All-Wheel Drive Models
With Single-Speed
Transfer Case
NOT ALLOWED
All-Wheel Drive
Models With
Two-Speed Transfer Case
See Instructions in “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL
(N)
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Rear Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on
the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the engine
is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km) with rear wheels on the ground can cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or
with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
All-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case
is operable, vehicles with a two-speed transfer case may
be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the
transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting and Operating” for detailed instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed will
all four wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . .505
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . . .507
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
7
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps. . . . . . . .547
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . .547
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps
(Bi-Xenon) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Bi-Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . .545
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . .547
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Engine Oil Dipstick
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Coolant Pressure Cap (Reservoir)
Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
6
7
8
9
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
(Continued)
(Continued)
7
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or
start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you
will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition
OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the
designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the
use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Engine Oil
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Checking Oil Level
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that
protect the performance and durability of your vehicle
and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not
use chemical flushes in these components as the
chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or
air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick.
Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom
of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the
safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
7
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use SAE
5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel Saver
Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter.
Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
filters should be used to assure most efficient service.
Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
7
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery
that the positive cable is attached to the positive post
and the negative cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-)
and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts and free of
corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a —
If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf —
If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection
Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP
(Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery
and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
7
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the
glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides
of the glove compartment door, partially close the glove
compartment door and push inward to release the glove
compartment travel stop on one side and repeat this
procedure for the opposite side.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove compartment door
toward the rear of the vehicle to disengage the glove
compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE: When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartment door and lifting the clip out of glove compartment
door.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
7
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the retaining tab
and mid way snap that secures the filter cover to the
HVAC housing. Disengage the mid way snap by pulling
the door outward. Unhinge the filter cover on the right
side to fully remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the glove
compartment door hinge and reattach the glove compartment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip away from the
face of the glove compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to reengage the
glove compartment travel stops.
NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
7
Lifting The Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward
unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade
off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward
to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
holder.
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Washer Fluid
The instrument cluster display will indicate when the washer
fluid level is low. When the sensor detects a low fluid level,
the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
Removing The Wiper Blade
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear
window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in
the engine compartment, be sure to check the fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the
washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it
to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will
help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your
climate. This rating information can be found on most
washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
Exhaust System
WARNING! (Continued)
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
(Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized
dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system
for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system, please contact your local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
7
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
Cooling System Pressure Cap
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point
or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
7
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Brake System
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately
if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” mark and
a “MIN” mark. The fluid level must be kept within these
two marks. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
(Continued)
7
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22
to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than 1/8 in
(3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to 22
to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage them
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
Transfer Case
Selection Of Lubricant
Fluid Level Check
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should be
inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adding Fluid
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole,
when the vehicle is in a level position.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure
optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid
specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
your transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
7
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Care
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
These products and automatic car washes may damage
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
CAUTION! (Continued)
the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with
a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
7
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose Cleaner
to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh,
damp towel to remove soap residue.
WARNING!
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Glass Surfaces
Seat Belt Maintenance
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro
fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each
fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the
inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
7
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F03
F05
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Green
Micro Fuse
–
–
F06
40 Amp Green
–
F07
F09
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
F10
40 Amp Green
–
Description
Radiator Fan
Compressor for Air Suspension —
If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Pump
Starter Solenoid
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel engine only)/
Brake Vacuum Pump
Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F11
F12
F13
F14
F17
F19
F20
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
F28
F29
F30
F32
F34
F35
F36
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
Body Controller #3/Power Locks
Blower Motor Front
Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
Passenger Door Module
Engine Control Module
Interior Lights #1
Driver Door Module
Front Wipers
Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module/
Valves
Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
Trailer Tow Receptacle — If Equipped
Drive Train Control Module
Slip Differential Control
Sunroof - If Equipped
Rear Defroster
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
Cavity
F37
F38
F39
F40
Cartridge Fuse
25 Amp Clear
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
Micro Fuse
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
F42
F44
F49
F50
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
F51
–
15 Amp Blue
F52
F53
–
–
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
F56
F57
F58
F59
F60
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
Description
Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
Power Inverter 115V AC — If Equipped
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp
Leveling
Horn
Diagnostic Port
Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
Air Suspension Control Module —
If Equipped
Ignition Node Module/Keyless Ignition/
Steering Column Lock
Battery Sensor
Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights —
If Equipped
Additional Content (Diesel engine only)
NOX Sensor
HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
Purging Pump (Diesel engine only)
Transmission Control Module
7
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F61
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F62
F63
F64
F66
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Clear
10 Amp Red
F67
–
15 Amp Blue
F68
F69
F70
F71
F72
F73
F75
F76
F77
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Green
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor
(Diesel engine only)
Air Conditioning Clutch
Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Diesel)
Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
Sunroof/Passenger Window Switches/Rain
Sensor
CD/DVD/Bluetooth Hands-free Module —
If Equipped
Rear Wiper Motor
Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
Fuel Pump Motor
Audio Amplifier
PCM — If Equipped
HID Headlamp RH — If Equipped
Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle
Disconnect Module
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
Cavity
F78
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F80
–
10 Amp Red
F81
F82
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F83
F84
F85
F86
F87
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
F88
F90/F91
F92
F93
F94
F95
–
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
Engine Control Module/Electric Power
Steering
Universal Garage Door Opener/Compass/
Anti-Intrusion Module
Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
Steering Column Control Module/Cruise
Control/DTV
Fuel Door
Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
Airbag Module
Airbag Module
Air Suspension — If Equipped / Trailer Tow
/ Steering Column Control Module
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Outlet (Rear seats) Selectable
Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
Shifter/Transfer Case Module
Rear Camera/ParkSense
7
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F96
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red
F97
–
20 Amp Yellow
F98
F99
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F100
F101
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
F103
F104
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger
- If Equipped
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel
- If Equipped
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems
Module/DSRC
Active Damping — If Equipped
Electrochromatic Mirror/Smart High Beams
— If Equipped
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console)
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When installing the power distribution center cover, it
is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and possibly
result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Glove Compartment Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Visor Vanity Lamp
Rear Cargo Lamp
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
V26377
214–2
906
103
74
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon) Headlamps
Low Beam/High Beam/Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Bi-Halogen Headlamps (Base)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen) Headlamps
(Uplevel)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (Base)
Front Turn Signal Lamps (Uplevel & Premium)
Front Park Lamp/Daytime Running Lamp (Uplevel &
Premium)
Front Side Marker Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Rear Tail Lamps/Sidemarker Lamps
Rear Stop/Turn Signal Lamps
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
Rear Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Bulb Number
D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
9005SL+
9005SL+
3157NAK
3157NAK
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
H11
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
921 (W16W)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced A Authorized Dealer)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (Bi-Xenon) —
If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should not
attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are turned
on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the
system charges.
Bi-Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
1. Turn the steering wheel to the left to replace the bulb
from the right hand lamp, or to the right to replace the
bulb from the left hand lamp.
2. Turn the access cap located on the wheel liner counterclockwise to remove from liner.
3. Locate the headlamp bulb access cap through the opening in the wheel liner.
4. Firmly grasp the access cap and rotate counterclockwise
to remove lamp housing.
5. Firmly grasp the low/high beam bulb and connector
assembly and rotate counterclockwise to remove from
housing.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector and then connect the
replacement bulb.
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
8. Install the bulb access cap in the headlamp housing and
rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
9. Install the access cap in the wheel liner and rotate
clockwise to lock it in place.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counterclockwise to remove from housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb.
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and rotate
the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb from the connector and install the
replacement bulb.
3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
lamp housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
CAUTION!
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp
wiring.
Rear Tail, Stop And Turn Signal Lamps
The rear tail, stop, and turn signal lamps are LED. See your
authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Back-up Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Back-up lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
4. Remove/replace bulb(s).
5. Reinstall the socket(s).
6. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LED. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API
Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API
Certified)
U.S.
Metric
24.6 Gallons
93.0 Liters
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
U.S.
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
10.4 Quarts
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent) – Without
Trailer Tow Package
11 Quarts
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer
Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
15.4 Quarts
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent) – Without
Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
16 Quarts
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer
Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
9.9 Liters
10.4 Liters
14.6 Liters
15.2 Liters
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug
the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
7
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE
J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
8
554 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Severe Duty All Models
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 555
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages
for required maintenance.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid, change if using your vehicle
for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
556 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs.**
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Change transfer case fluid.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 557
X
X
X
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
558 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .563
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .561
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
9
560 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the
right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 561
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
9
562 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 563
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
9
564 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Canada
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 565
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
566 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
568 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .157
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Adjust
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 116
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 116
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64, 500
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 89, 242
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .513
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356, 515
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . .355, 357
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514, 515
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354, 514
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Alarm, Panic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 245
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523, 548
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .354
INDEX 569
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 530
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529, 530
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529, 552
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .208
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246, 513
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527, 552
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410, 526
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543, 545
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 451
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Cargo Tie-Downs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
10
570 INDEX
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .508
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . . .79
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . . .72
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .69
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Climate Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522, 525
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .523, 548, 550
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 263
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
INDEX 571
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Door Ajar Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . . .29
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 28
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System). . . . . . . . .320
Economy (Fuel) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . .
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.391
.208
.225
.104
.400
.411
.411
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .154, 155, 157
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .248
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .508
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505, 506
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505, 506
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 451
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510, 548
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
10
572 INDEX
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511, 548, 550
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511, 512
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . .64, 500
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 451
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 521
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 543
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356, 515
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 260, 546, 547
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Light Service. . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Collision Warning. . . .
Four-Way Hazard Flasher. . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . .
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .
.....
.....
.....
.....
Parts .
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.530
.527
.510
.552
.550
.546
.546
.128
.177
.476
.493
.528
.448
.452
.449
.449
.391
.449
.448
.255
.449
.449
.448
.548
INDEX 573
Specifications
Tank Capacity
Fueling. . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.550
.548
.452
.536
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information. . . . . . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating. . . . . . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.197
.449
.448
.449
.393
.448
.535
.457
.457
.455
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 225
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.459
.213
.197
.138
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Key Fob Not Detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Keyless Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Keyless Push Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .239, 245, 248, 258, 260
Instrument Cluster Display
Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Instrument Panel And Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
10
574 INDEX
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . .483
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478, 483
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .15, 20
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Unlock The Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .20
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . .18, 20
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 288
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 288
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
LaneSense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 139
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 89, 242
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
INDEX 575
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261, 263
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .250
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 262
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 195
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Rear Tail Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 139, 260, 546, 547
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .245, 260
Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .250, 508
Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Memory Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
10
576 INDEX
Memory Seats And Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509, 563
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268, 510
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511, 548
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511, 512, 548
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .5, 564
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
INDEX 577
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . .426, 427
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 116
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407, 552
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Power Seats
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 116
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 116
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115, 116
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Programming Key Fobs (Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . .18
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 16, 23, 26, 34
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Rain Sensitive Wiper System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Rear Cupholder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . .471
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . .473
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
10
578 INDEX
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Flash Lights With Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .15, 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .336
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . .26, 290
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 290
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . .46
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 89
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . . .46
INDEX 579
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42, 45
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 116, 120
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 116, 117
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 245
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390, 392
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 260, 546, 547
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373, 374
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 436, 437, 479
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550, 552
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156, 157
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . .154, 155, 157
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 383
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386, 389
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
10
580 INDEX
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .336
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355, 543
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Sunglasses Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Sun Visor Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .354
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . .426, 427
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 431, 435, 565
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 431
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478, 489
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431, 435
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426, 428
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439, 489
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 431
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435, 437, 479
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
INDEX 581
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456, 497
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 529
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . .197
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260, 546, 547
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . .26, 290
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 26, 290
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Customer Programmable Features . . . . .28, 30, 37, 288
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . .28, 30, 37, 288
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 288
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Universal Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
10
582 INDEX
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Vanity Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 455
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .16
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355, 543
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511, 512
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148, 520
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 207
Window Fogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Windshield Washers . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blades .
Windshield Wipers . . . . .
Wiper Blade Replacement.
Wipers, Intermittent. . . . .
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.148
.520
.518
.148
.518
.149
.150
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2017 Durango
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2017
17WD01-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Durango
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising